300
Chrysler Group LLC
O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L
2012 300
12C481-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
905579_300_OM cover.indd 1 3/15/11 3:26 PM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your percep-
tions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judg-
ment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 87
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................271
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................343
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 447
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................471
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................525
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 541
10
INDEX
...................................................................551
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
ment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) ............. 12
▫ KeyFob............................ 14
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ......... 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 .......................... 16
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 18
▫ General Information ................... 18
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫ Rearming Of The System ................ 18
▫ To Arm The System ................... 19
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 19
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ........... 21
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 21
▫ To Unlock The Doors .................. 22
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 23
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk .................. 24
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
2
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 24
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 25
▫ General Information ................... 26
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 26
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 27
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 29
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 29
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................... 32
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ................... 34
䡵 Windows ............................ 38
▫ Power Windows ...................... 38
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 41
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ................. 41
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning ................... 42
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ............... 43
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 43
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 47
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 52
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 52
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped ......................... 53
▫ Energy Management Feature ............. 54
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioner .................. 54
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 55
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 56
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 56
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................ 56
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 62
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 70
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 71
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 81
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 82
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 82
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 83
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 84
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 86
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect Touch™ system, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make
sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa-
tion).
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
•
Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
•
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infor-
mation).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
•
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
•
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect Touch™. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
3.
Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid
surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery
to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Trunk closed
•
HAZARD switch off
•
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
•
System not disabled from previous remote start event
•
Vehicle theft alarm not active
•
Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will
flash and the horn will chirp twice (if pro-
grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in
the EVIC until you push the START button.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull
the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
theft alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
•
The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
•
The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
•
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•
There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
located on the deck lid.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
•
After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect
Touch™, the power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can be-
come entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may re-
sult in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO-
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if
equipped). To disable the window controls and the rear
sunscreen, press and release the window lockout button
(setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
controls and the rear sunscreen, press and release the
window lockout button again (setting it in the UP
position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds or by
using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release fea-
ture will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Release
Button
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-
dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant
Trunk Emergency Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints
or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-
led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and
SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-
tivating BeltAlert威.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
Being too close to the side air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of
the air bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Based on several factors, including the severity and type
of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of
the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of
non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and the door.
The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of collision. In these
events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the
impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power, until the ignition key is re-
moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using
the Keyless Go Start/Stop button.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you
might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irrita-
tion, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first cycled to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An-
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger air bag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages that
are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child
seats. You should never install LATCH-compatible child
seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If
installing child seats in adjacent rear-seating positions, or if
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the
restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are located just below
the button with the anchorage symbol on the
rear seat, but are not visible. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback
and seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchor-
age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing
the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the
anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and adjustable headrest (with the headrest in
the full down position) then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback
and the rear window.
Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
Adjustable Headrest Downward Position
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode”. The chart below defines the
seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
Driver Center Passenger
CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Next, extract
all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then
allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 94
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror .............. 94
▫ Outside Mirrors ...................... 95
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 95
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped ......................... 95
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped ......... 95
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped ...... 96
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 97
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped ......................... 98
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 98
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 98
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor ........................... 99
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped ....... 100
▫ Rear Cross Path ..................... 105
▫ Modes Of Operation .................. 106
3
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone (8.4/8.4N) ............. 108
▫ Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 NAV .......... 108
▫ Operation ......................... 110
▫ Phone Call Features .................. 122
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 126
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 131
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 131
▫ General Information .................. 141
䡵 Voice Command ...................... 142
▫ Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 NAV .......... 142
▫ Uconnect™ Voice Commands ........... 144
▫ Voice Tree ......................... 146
䡵 Seats .............................. 157
▫ Power Seats ........................ 157
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped ........... 160
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 160
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......... 163
▫ Head Restraints ..................... 165
▫ Folding Rear Seat .................... 168
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ........ 169
▫ Programming The Memory Feature ....... 170
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory ........... 171
▫ Memory Position Recall ................ 171
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) ................... 172
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 173
䡵 Lights ............................. 175
▫ Headlight Switch .................... 175
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 176
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 176
▫ Headlight Time Delay ................. 176
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped ............ 177
▫ Steering Directed Headlights —
If Equipped ........................ 178
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) .......... 179
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 179
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 179
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 180
▫ Turn Signals ........................ 181
▫ Lane Change Assist ................... 181
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ............... 181
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 181
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ............. 182
▫ Courtesy Lights ..................... 183
▫ Ambient Light ...................... 183
▫ Interior Lights ...................... 184
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 186
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 187
▫ Wiper Operation ..................... 187
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 188
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 188
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 188
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....... 189
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 190
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped .......................... 191
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 192
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped .......... 194
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 196
▫ To Activate ......................... 197
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ................ 197
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 197
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 198
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 198
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 198
䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped .......................... 199
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 202
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 202
▫ To Activate ......................... 203
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed ............ 204
▫ To Cancel .......................... 206
▫ ToTurnOff ........................ 206
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 207
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 207
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .... 208
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ..... 212
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ....... 213
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC ...... 216
▫ General Information .................. 220
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode ............................. 220
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . 222
䡵 Parksense威 Park Assist — If Equipped ...... 225
▫ Parksense威 Sensors ................... 225
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display ............ 226
▫ Parksense威 Display ................... 227
▫ Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ......... 231
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 ....... 231
▫ Service The Parksense威 Park Assist System . . 231
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System ......... 232
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions ...... 232
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera —
If Equipped .......................... 235
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
With Touch Screen Radio ............... 236
䡵 Overhead Console ..................... 237
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ............. 237
▫ Sunglass Bin Door ................... 238
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 238
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 ........................ 240
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ........... 240
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ........ 242
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .... 244
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 245
▫ Security ........................... 245
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 246
▫ General Information .................. 247
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 247
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 248
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 248
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 248
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 249
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 249
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 249
▫ Sunshade Operation .................. 249
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 250
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 250
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 250
䡵 Commandview威 Sunroof With Power Shade —
If Equipped .......................... 251
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 252
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 252
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 252
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 252
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express ......... 252
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode .... 253
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express ......... 253
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode ..... 253
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 253
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 253
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 254
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 254
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed .................. 254
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 254
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 259
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ................. 259
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ................. 261
䡵 Storage ............................. 262
▫ Glovebox Storage .................... 262
▫ Console Features .................... 262
▫ Door Storage ....................... 264
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . 264
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat ................ 265
䡵 Cargo Area Features ................... 266
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped .............. 266
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks ................... 267
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 267
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 267
▫ Power Sunshade — If Equipped .......... 268
䡵 Load Leveling System — If Equipped ....... 270
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dim-
ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s
side when equipped with turn signal and approach
lighting.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door
handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area
in front of the doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when
the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
NOTE:
•
The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect Touch™ System.
•
Refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: Pressing the power folding mirror switch for
more than four seconds, or if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h) will disable the folding feature.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones BSM Warning Light
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi-
mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect Touch™ System. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) volume will
be reduced.
NOTE:
•
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
•
If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re-
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled
and used.
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailable-
Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Uconnect™ Phone (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect™ Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
•
Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths Mo-
bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
•
Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
•
Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smiths Mobile”).
•
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
•
Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”).
•
View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
Recent Calls”).
•
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features:
•
Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen.
•
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touch-screen.
•
Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
•
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
•
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
•
Sending a text message via the touch-screen.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the
touch-screen.
•
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth威 for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with the system
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or
French languages.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The Uconnect™ Phone
Button is used to
get into the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone-
book etc., When you press the button you will
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Uconnect™ Voice Command Button
The Uconnect™ Voice Command
Button
is only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
The
button is also used to access the Voice
Commands for the Uconnect™ Voice Command features
if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect™
Voice Command section for direction on how to use the
button.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
ods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile”.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or an-
other prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
bile”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts
and say each part of the command when you are asked
for it. For example, you can use the compound com-
mand form voice command “Search for John Smith”,
or you can break the compound command form into
two voice commands: “Search Contact” and when
asked “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect™
Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver-
sational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few
feet/meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect™ Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Voice Command
button.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
the
button and say a command or say “help”. All
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also press the
or buttons when the
system is listening for a command and be returned to the
main or previous menu.
NOTE: Pressing the
or buttons while the
system is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to
“Barge In — Overriding Prompts” for further
information.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
NOTE:
•
You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
•
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled mobile
phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch™ screen.
•
If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from
the Uconnect™ Phone main screen,
•
Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
•
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect Touch™ screen,
•
See Step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this
is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over
other paired phones within range.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
•
Touch the “More” soft-key to begin,
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
•
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect
Touch™ screen,
•
Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
•
When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take pre-
cedence over other paired phones within range.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
priority.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
•
“Show Paired Phones” or
•
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device
•
Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin,
•
Change the Source to Bluetooth威,
•
Touch the “Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
•
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en-
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect
Touch™ screen,
•
Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
•
When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
•
“Show Paired Audio Devices”
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device
Uconnect™ Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you would need to choose a particular
phone or Audio Device follow these steps:
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired
Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
•
The options pop-up will be displayed,
•
Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the Phone/Bluetooth威 soft-key,
•
Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
currently connected device,
•
The options pop-up will be displayed,
•
Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
•
The options pop-up will be displayed,
•
Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
chosen device move to the top of the list,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone
main screen.
2.
After loading the mobile phonebook, select phonebook
from the Phone main screen, then select the appropriate
number. Touch the + next to the selected number to display
the options pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key and
then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch the +
on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be asked which
contact and number to choose from your mobile phone-
book. When complete the new favorite will be shown.
To Remove A Favorite
•
To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
•
Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
•
Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
•
The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
Favs”.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only
be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannot
be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these
steps.
•
Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
•
Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the
bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing
Favorites.
•
Touch the + Options soft-key.
•
Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
•
The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
to default.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth威 on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
vider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Redial
•
Dial by touching in the number
•
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
•
Favorite Phonebook
•
Mobile Phonebook
•
Recent Call Log
•
SMS Message Viewer
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
done with 1 call or less active.
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number
248-555-1212.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
•
Press the button to begin,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call
features:
•
Answer
•
End
•
Ignore
•
Hold/unhold
•
Mute/unmute
•
Transfer the call to/from the phone
•
Swap 2 active calls
•
Join 2 active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
•
Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
•
The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
•
Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call”.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
the
button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or
you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail
password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
•
Incoming Calls
•
Outgoing Calls
•
Missed Calls
•
All Calls
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
You can also press the
button and say “Show my
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To ignore the
call, touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You
can also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the blue
caller ID box.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the phone
button, answer
soft-key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from
the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to
“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two
calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
Phone main screen.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also press the
button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
far end, a call on hold may not become active automati-
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
Redial
•
Press the “Redial” soft-key,
•
or press the and after the “Listening” prompt and
the following beep, say “Redial”,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Redial”,
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth威 connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call Emergency or Dial Emergency” and the
Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile
phone to call the emergency number. This feature is
supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touch-screen.
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Towing Assistance”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance call may also be initiated by
touch.
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touch-screen or press the
button and say the word
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the
button and say, “Send 3 7
4 6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence
of numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
to leave a number on a pager.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
Password”, then if you press the
button and say
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect™ Phone will
then send the corresponding phone number associated
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
•
Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial-
ing a numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The button can be used when you wish to skip part
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
the
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
•
Touch the “More” soft-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
•
Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
Voice Response Length,
•
Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
show your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform
you of your phone and network status when you are
attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™
Phone. The status is given for network signal strength
and phone battery strength.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone simply touch the
Mute button on the Phone main screen.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking
the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the
vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
•
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition
rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth威 in order
to use this feature. If the Uconnect™ Phone determines
your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth威 the “Messaging” button will be greyed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
NOTE: Uconnect™ Phone SMS is only available when
the vehicle is not in moving.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
•
Send a Reply
•
Forward
•
Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
•
Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,
•
If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent,
•
Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
•
Press the button,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,
•
After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List”. There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pressing the
button and
saying the message you want to send.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Voice Tree
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
•
You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
“Other”.
•
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
•
Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
•
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
•
You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
•
If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
•
Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
•
You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
“Other”.
•
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
•
Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
•
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
•
You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
•
If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
•
Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
VOICE COMMAND
Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav
The Uconnect™ Voice Command system al-
lows you to control your AM, FM radio, satel-
lite radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
Sirius Travel Link.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
When you press the Uconnect™ Voice Command
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to
give a command.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
•
I didn’t understand
•
I didn’t get that, etc.,
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session with end.
Pressing the Uconnect™ Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect™ Voice
Command
button and say “Help”. You will hear
available commands for the screen displayed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Natural Speech
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Uconnect™ Voice Command
button.
Uconnect™ Voice Commands
The Uconnect™ Voice Command system understands
two types of commands. Universal commands are avail-
able at all times. Local commands are available if the
supported radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect™ Voice Com-
mand
button.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect™ Voice
Command
button.
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.
This command can be given in any mode or screen:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Voice Tree
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM”.
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite station
named received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding
names on the current device that is playing.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when CD
is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music database provided by Gracenote.
5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”.
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams”.
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or “Show
ski info” to get other forecasts.
4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”,
“Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”.
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find
Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find Recently
Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”.
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”,
“Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Entertain-
ment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Community”,
“Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Airport”, “Po-
lice Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto Dealers”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down,
forward or rearward.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect Touch™ System.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Power Lumbar Switch
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Front Heated Seat Operations — Uconnect Touch™
8.4 and 8.4 Nav:
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect Touch™ display.
Controls Soft-Key
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-
key a second time to select LO-level heating.
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There
are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passen-
gers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Press the switch a second time to select LO-
level heating. Press the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and
front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect
Touch™ System.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Front Ventilated Seat Operation — Uconnect
Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav:
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect Touch™ display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Controls Soft-Key
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Push Button
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two positions, up or down.
When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint
should be in the raised position. When there are no
occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for tether routing.
Push Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loop
Folded Rear Seatback
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi-
tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE:
•
Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
•
Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the
memory function. Use either the memory recall switch
or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory
feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) will display which memory posi-
tion has been set.
NOTE:
•
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
Memory Seat Switch
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch™ System,
refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go).
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press and
release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster on
vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed
by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if equipped).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number (1) on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number (2) on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side
mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop mov-
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recall
can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
•
When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
RUN position.
•
When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the
driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in
(22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled using the Uconnect Touch™ System,
refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch™ System,
refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
•
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
•
The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “Uconnect Touch™
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•
SmartBeam™ can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “Uconnect Touch™
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
•
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,
film, and other obstructions on the windshield or
camera lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, the
SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See your local authorized dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal opera-
tion of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
Steering Directed Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
•
Each time the Steering Directed Headlight System is
turned on, the headlights will initialize by performing
a brief sequence of rotations.
•
The Steering Directed Headlight System is active only
when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Steering Directed Headlight System can be turned
On or Off using the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when-
ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the
headlights are off and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off
the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If a flash-to-pass request is held for 20 seconds
then the high beams will shut off until another Flash-To-
Pass or high beam command is requested.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Ambient Light Control
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
•
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•
Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the transmission shift lever is in the NEU-
TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than
5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column switch is located below the multifunc-
tion lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down
as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from
you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed po-
sitions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect Touch™ System.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material.. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will
turn off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
•
The ACC system:
−
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming ve-
hicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped ve-
hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
−
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight
distance conditions.
−
Does not predict the lane curvature or the move-
ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate
for such changes.
−
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
−
Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s
braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
•
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
(e.g., in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
•
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
•
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
•
Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruis-
ing at a constant preset speed. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-
plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
4 — CANCEL
5 — ON/OFF
6 — MODE
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
•
When you apply the brakes.
•
When the parking brake is set.
•
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
•
When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
•
The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
ACC Set
Driver Override
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
•
You softly tap the brake pedal.
•
You depress the brake pedal.
•
You press the CANCEL switch.
•
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
•
If the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•
You push and release the ON/OFF button.
•
You turn OFF the ignition.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to in-
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
Pressing the RES + button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to de-
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
EVIC display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Pressing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE:
•
When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (me-
dium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Set 3 (long)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1
(short).
Distance Set 2 (medium) Distance Set 1 (short)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•
The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
itself.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Alert 3 Brake Alert 2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC”
or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC
or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line.
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to
display the following information:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
−
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Brake Alert 1
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
−
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
ACC SET
−
When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•
Set Speed Change
•
Distance Setting Change
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
The EVIC will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
•
If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
authorized dealer for service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-
ary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruis-
ing at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir-
ing the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
“Cruise Ready” will be displayed if the system was in
ACC READY or ACC SET position. “Cruise Off” will be
displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position. To
switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, press the
MODE button a second time.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
•
Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and press the SET - button.
•
Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respec-
tively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
(8 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
erasing the memory if:
•
You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
•
You press the CANCEL button.
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
To Resume
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
speed.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•
You push and release the ON/OFF button.
•
You turn off the ignition.
•
You switch off ESC.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
Normal Cruise Control).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) warns the driver of a
potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and
prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is
10 mph (16 km/h).
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
using the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. The FCW Status Off, Near
or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect Touch™ display.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
NOTE:
•
In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the
Uconnect Touch™ display.
•
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
•
FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncom-
ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un-
available screens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error Warning
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE姞 PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions for limi-
tations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense威 sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect
Touch™ System. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
The ParkSense威 Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle.
Park Assist Display
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Display
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
Park Assist System ON
Park Assist System Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
59 in (150 cm)
59-39 in
(150-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None
Single 1/2 sec-
ond tone (for
rear only)
Slow (for rear
only)
Fast Continuous
Arc None
3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense威 will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect Touch™ System. The available choices are: Off,
Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
When the ParkSense威 soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
or to DRIVE (at or below 7 mph [11 km/h]) and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five
seconds in REVERSE or for 5 seconds when the vehicle is
in DRIVE.
Service The ParkSense姞 Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 Park Assist System is malfunction-
ing, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle. The instrument cluster will
display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” message when any
of the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked by snow, mud, or
ice and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE or DRIVE.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST” message when any of the rear or front sensors
are damaged and require service. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE or DRIVE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or
the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE or DRIVE (at speeds
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
less than 7 mph [11 km/h]). Under this condition
ParkSense威 will not operate. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST⬙ or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威
system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
•
When you turn ParkSense威 off, the EVIC will display
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE or
DRIVE position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the
EVIC will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”
message for approximately five seconds in REVERSE
or for 5 seconds when the vehicle is in DRIVE.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense威.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Park Assist System.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威 Park Assist System, it
is strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns on the single
flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to
a hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate
zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With Touch
Screen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “More” soft-key.
3. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview威
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can
be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the
console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will also
turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
Sunglass Bin Door
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
3.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has suc-
cessfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured after
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on
the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close opera-
tion, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re-
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi-
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
•
The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect Touch™ System. Refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
COMMANDVIEW姞 SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView威 sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
CommandView威 Sunroof and Power Shade Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will open automatically
from any position. The shade will open fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment and the shade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. The shade will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re-
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi-
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
•
The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect Touch™ System. Refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are three 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.
Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of
the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
has power available only when the ignition is placed in
the ACC or RUN position.
Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel And
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Retractable Cover
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Heated and Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Heat” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup-
holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise par-
ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’ s elbows.
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Console Features
There is a cubby bin located forward of the shift lever.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated
door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door
a second time to close it.
Glovebox Storage Compartment
Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the center console armrest.
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Front Door Trim Storage
Rear Armrest Storage
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The
trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from
mud, snow, and debris.
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GROCERY BAG HOOKS
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs
(22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
Grocery Bag Hooks
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade
that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine
through the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect
Touch™ System.
Press the “Controls” soft-key and then press the “Sun-
shade” soft-key to raise the power sunscreen. Press the
“Sunshade” soft-key a second time to lower the sun-
shade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is
placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically
fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the
fully raised position after approximately five seconds.
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out with the rear passenger window controls from the
driver switch window lockout switch.
Controls Soft-Key
Power Sunshade Soft-Key
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers
in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located
on the back of the center console between the heated seat
switches. Press the switch once to raise the sunshade.
Press the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
Power Sunshade Switch
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 273
䡵 Instrument Cluster .................... 274
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium ........... 275
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 276
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 285
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ........................... 287
▫ EVIC White Telltales .................. 288
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales ................. 289
▫ EVIC Red Telltales ................... 290
▫ Oil Change Due ..................... 293
▫ Fuel Economy ...................... 294
▫ Cruise Control ...................... 296
▫ Vehicle Speed ....................... 296
▫ Trip Info .......................... 297
▫ TirePSI ........................... 298
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) ......... 298
4
▫ Messages # ......................... 299
▫ Turn Menu Off ...................... 299
䡵 Uconnect Touch™ Settings ............... 299
▫ Hard-Keys ......................... 299
▫ Soft-Keys .......................... 299
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Settings
(If Equipped) ....................... 300
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4 Settings
(If Equipped) ....................... 313
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock ................ 328
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped ..... 328
䡵 Harman Kardon威 Logic7威 High Performance
Multichannel Surround Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) —
If Equipped .......................... 328
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ............ 330
▫ Radio Operation ..................... 330
▫ CD Player ......................... 331
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 331
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ....... 332
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 332
▫ General Overview .................... 333
▫ Climate Control Functions .............. 339
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..... 340
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 341
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — ESC Off Switch 13 — Engine Start/Stop Button
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect Touch™ System Hard Controls 14 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Hazard Switch 9 — SD Memory Card Slot 15 — Dimmer Controls
4 — Uconnect Touch™ System 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Hood Release
5 — Climate Control Hard Controls 11 — CD/DVD Slot 17 — Headlight Switch
6 — Glove Compartment 12 — Storage Compartment 18 — Analog Clock
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
4. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
5. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display
Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto-
matic transmission.
NOTE:
•
You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
•
The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift
lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
7.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
9. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
10. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
11. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
12. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
14. Sport Mode — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
based tuning. For further information, refer to
”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.
15. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
16. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
17. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
18. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
20. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call an authorized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
Radio Info
•
Fuel Economy Info
•
Cruise Control Info
•
Digital Vehicle Speed
•
Trip Info
•
Tire Pressure
•
Vehicle Info
•
Stored Warning Messages
•
Turn Menu OFF
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll up-
ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info
and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Ve-
hicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info,
Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menu and Vehicle
Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip
Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button to access
the information screens or sub-menu screens of
a main menu item. Press and hold the SELECT
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or sub-menu item.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line
and outside temperature are displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom-
eter line.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message
takes control of the main display area for five seconds and
then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of
this type are then stored (as long as the condition that
activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the
⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long as there is a stored
message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/
outside temp line. Examples of this message type are ⬙Right
Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙ and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex-
amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Un-
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
EVIC White Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
•
Shift Lever Status
The selected AutoStick gear is displayed as ⬙1⬙, ⬙2⬙, ⬙3⬙,
⬙4⬙, ⬙5⬙,or⬙6⬙ and indicate the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) feature has been engaged and the gear selected is
displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to
“Starting And Operating”.
•
Electronic Speed Control ON
This telltale will illuminate when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is
ON. For further information, refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is
SET. For further information, refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Amber Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
•
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
This telltale informs the driver that the For-
ward Collision Warning feature is Off. The
telltale is On when the front radar sensor is
blocked and requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW
sensors require service, or the ACC/FCW system is
unavailable because of a system error. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
•
Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
•
Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
•
SERV AWD (Service All Wheel Drive) Indicator
This light will turn on when the All Wheel
Drive feature requires service. For further in-
formation, refer to “All Wheel Drive” in “Start-
ing And Operating.”
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
•
Door Ajar
This telltale turns on when one or more doors
are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are
ajar.
•
Trunk Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk
lid is ajar.
•
Oil Pressure Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when this light turns on.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
•
Charging System Telltale
This telltale shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-
essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at
idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means
that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale
This telltale informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the
telltale comes on while driving, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn off.
If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the telltale
is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service
is required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
•
Engine Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this telltale will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
allowed to cool.
If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
•
Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-
TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
•
Electric Power Steering Malfunction
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The ⬙Oil Change Due⬙ message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded at the start of each ignition that an oil
change is due. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Fuel
Economy⬙ is highlighted. Press the SELECT button and
the next screen will display the following:
•
Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
•
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Average Fuel Economy / ECO Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The word
⬙RESET>⬙ (with right arrow) appears next to it. Pressing
the right arrow button will reset Average Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
which displays ⬙0⬙ immediately after reset. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
There is an ECO icon in the lower portion of the EVIC
display. This icon will appear whenever the Multi-
Displacement System (MDS) (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. Press the
BACK button to return to the main menu.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display. Press
the BACK button to return to the main menu.
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
The Miles Per Gallon (MPG) feature displays instanta-
neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE, this
function cannot be reset. Press the BACK button to return
to the main menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Cruise Control
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙ACC⬙ (if
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control) or ⬙Cruise⬙ is
highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC or Cruise is
displayed in the menu line also. Press and release the
SELECT (right arrow) button to display the following
information:
•
If equipped with ACC, one of several messages will be
displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the
feature as the driver changes feature status or follow-
ing conditions change. If ACC is active and a warning
or other feature is in the EVIC main display, the ACC
status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer
line.
•
For vehicles with Cruise, one of several messages will
be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of
the feature as the driver changes feature status or
conditions change. If Cruise is active and a warning or
other feature is in the EVIC main display, the Cruise
status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer
line.
Press and release the BACK button to return to the main
menu.
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Vehicle
Speed⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
button to view a digital display of the current speed in
mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time
will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.
Press the BACK button to return to the main menu.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Trip
Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
SELECT button to display the following three trip fea-
tures in the next screen:
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions or press the BACK button to
return to the main menu.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON or START position.
Resetting A Trip Info Function
To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN
buttons. Push the SELECT button until the feature dis-
plays zero.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙
is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the SELECT
button and one of the following will be displayed:
•
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
•
If one or more tires have low pressure, ⬙Tire Pressure
LOW⬙ is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
•
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, ⬙Service
Tire Pressure System⬙ is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the BACK button to return to the
main menu.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Vehicle
Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
SELECT button and Coolant Temp will be displayed.
Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through the
following information displays.
•
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
•
AWD Status — If Equipped
Displays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted
and ⬙AWD⬙ if All Wheel Drive is active. Displays a
vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and ⬙RWD⬙ if
All Wheel Drive is inactive.
•
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
•
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
•
Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Messages #
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main
Menu.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Press-
ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
Uconnect Touch™ SETTINGS
The Uconnect Touch™ system uses a combination of soft
and hard keys located on the center of the instrument
panel that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect Touch™
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-
ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
Touch™ 4.3 Settings (If Equipped)
In this mode the Uconnect Touch™ system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors
& Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup
through hard-keys and soft-keys.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft key to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting
1 — Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
•
Brightness
Touch the Brightness soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale between the + and –
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
•
Mode
Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back
soft-key.
•
Language
Touch the Language soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) soft-
key to select the language preferred. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected language.
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Soft-Keys
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
•
Units
Touch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
units of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected units of measure.
•
Voice Response
Touch the Voice Response soft-key to change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
•
Touch Screen Beep
Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shut
off the sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-
key) is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting
press and release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Fuel Saver Display
Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key to turn the “ECO”
message (located in the instrument cluster display) on or
off. To make your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
Clock
•
Set Time
Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. When
in this display, you may select the time display settings.
To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key,
adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down
soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections are
complete.
•
Show Time Status
Touch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show
Time Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
•
Sync Time
Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and
release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
Safety / Assistance
•
Front Collision Warning — If Equipped
Touch the Front Collision Warning soft-key to change this
display. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can
be can be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default
status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system
will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away. This gives you
the most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamic
driving experience. To change the FCW status, press and
release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
•
Park Assist
Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. The
Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status,
press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and
Display soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function
and operating information.
•
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the outside rear-
view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in
the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in
the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
their previous position when the transmission is shifted
out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt
Mirrors In Reverse soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
•
Blind Spot Alert
Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft-key to change this dis-
play. When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert
feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights”
mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Moni-
tor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
OFF, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Rain Sensing
Touch the Rain Sensing soft-key to change this display.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key.
•
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display.
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Lights
•
Illuminated Approach
Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will
activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach
status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Headlights With Wipers
Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key
and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
•
Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™”
Touch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain
conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High
Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
•
Daytime Running Lights
Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-
key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
•
Steering Directed Lights
Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn
relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To
make your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
•
Flash Headlights With Lock
Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash
Headlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
•
Auto Unlock On Exit
Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto
Unlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
•
Flash Lights With Lock
Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the front and rear
turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights With
Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Sound Horn With Remote Start
Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote
Start soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Sound Horn With Lock
Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirp
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON
or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
•
Remote Door Unlock Order
Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to change
this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press
is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
•
Memory Linked to FOB
Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft-key to change this
display. This feature provides automatic driver seat po-
sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle, driver 1 and driver 2 last mode,
settings and presets. To make your selection, touch the
Memory Linked to FOB soft-key and select ON or OFF.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the
Passive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Heated Seats
•
Auto Heated Seats
Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated
seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are
below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your selection, touch the
Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Engine Off Options
•
Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-key to change this display.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats
soft-key, and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
•
Headlight Off Delay
Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
•
Engine Off Power Delay
Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds,
45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings
•
Variance
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Com-
pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences,
the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass
will automatically compensate for the differences, and
provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Audio
•
Equalizer
Touch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
•
Balance / Fade
Touch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
•
Speed Adjusted Volume
Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change this
display. This feature increases or decreases volume rela-
tive to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
Volume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Surround Sound
Touch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this dis-
play. This feature provides simulated surround sound
mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
Phone / Bluetooth
•
Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Touch™ Supplement.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SIRIUS Setup
•
Channel Skip
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
•
Subscription Info
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
Touch™ System 8.4 Settings (If Equipped)
Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect Touch™ system allows you to access program-
mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS
Setup.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and release
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
Uconnect Touch™ 8.4 Soft-Keys
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
•
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
•
Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•
Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Fuel Saver Display In Cluster
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
•
Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
•
Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Show Time In Status Bar
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
Safety / Assistance
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
•
Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of
FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn
you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are farther away. This gives you the most
reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic
driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamic
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
driving experience. To change the FCW status, touch and
release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
•
Park Assist
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-
tem function and operating information.
•
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir-
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE-
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•
ParkView威 Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView威 Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
•
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
•
Steering Directed Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head-
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
•
Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
•
Flash Headlight With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
selection, touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•
Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
•
Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
•
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When Driver Door is selected, only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door
is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All
Doors is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first
press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed to All Doors, all
doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver
Door is programmed touching the handle more than once
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will only result in the driver’s door unlocking. If Driver
Door is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
•
Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-
Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•
Personal Settings Linked To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
•
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
•
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
•
Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds,
45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key.
•
Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
•
Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
•
Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
•
Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
•
Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
•
Music Info Cleanup
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
•
Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
•
Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Touch™ Supplement.
SIRIUS Setup
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available.
•
Channel Skip
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Touch™
User’s Manual.
HARMAN KARDON姞 Logic7姞 HIGH
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon威 audio
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
Setting The Analog Clock
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver-
ing substantial increases in component and system effi-
ciency levels.
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
supply and drives a 7.5-channel playback architecture.
The Harman Kardon威 audio system offers the ability to
choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source. The
GreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure the
system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy-
namic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maxi-
mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier
output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat surround
sound processing.
Logic7威 multichannel surround-sound technology deliv-
ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position. This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
AUX input; and is activated through the Uconnect
Touch™ System. Refer to “Surround Sound” under
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
Selecting “Audio Surround” through the DSS modes
activates the Harman Kardon威 Logic7威 multichannel
surround-sound technology in your vehicle. The “Video
Surround” mode is described under Driver-Selectable
Surround (DSS). The Video Surround Mode will only be
available for video media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or
other video media supported by the radio). Some audio
will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-
matically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/CD, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the Automatic
Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
Uconnect Touch™ system display.
When the Uconnect Touch™ system is in different modes
(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and pas-
senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of
the display.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Overview
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 screen in the center of the instru-
ment panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect Touch™ screen.
Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3 — Hard-key (If Equipped)
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
(ATC System Shown)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ system
screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3 Manual Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys (If Equipped)
Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4 Automatic Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Performing this function will cause the automatic opera-
tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator
will turn off.
2. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
3. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position. Blower control should be left in the “ON”
position to allow the climate control to either warm or
cool the vehicle
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
Soft-key — Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3 (If Equipped)
Press the blower soft-key to enter the blower setting
screen. Once in the blower settings screen use the UP and
DOWN arrows to adjust the blower speed setting, or
directly select the speed setting by pressing the blower
bar area around the blower icon. The blower speed
increases as you press the UP arrow or move clockwise
on the setting scale and decreases when press the DOWN
arrow or move counter-clockwise on the setting scale.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Soft-key — Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set-
tings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
9. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
10. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-
cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
11. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-
cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
•
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
•
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort
conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
•
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
•
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
•
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
selected, the blower level may increase.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. SYNC
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
NOTE:
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. On systems with
Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control
button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instru-
ment panel.
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ system
screen.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2.
Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tempera-
ture hard or soft control buttons (6, 7, 10, 11). Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Touch™ System Set-
tings” in this section of the manual.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
•
Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
•
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 348
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 348
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go ................... 349
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 349
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) ............... 351
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 351
▫ After Starting ....................... 352
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 352
䡵 Automatic Transmission ................. 353
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 354
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 354
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission –
3.6L Engine ........................ 355
▫ Standard Shifter ..................... 355
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 355
▫ Optional Shifter With AutoStick威 ......... 358
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission –
5.7L Engine ........................ 358
5
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 359
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 365
▫ Operation – 3.6L Engine ............... 366
▫ Operation – 5.7L Engine ............... 367
䡵 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped ...... 369
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 370
▫ Acceleration ........................ 370
▫ Traction ........................... 370
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 371
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 371
▫ Shallow Standing Water ............... 371
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 373
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only .......... 374
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 375
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System ................. 377
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 379
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 379
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 380
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 380
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 381
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................ 383
▫ Ready Alert Braking .................. 385
▫ Rain Brake Support ................... 385
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light ............ 386
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Synchronizing ESC ................... 387
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 387
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 387
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 391
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 392
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 393
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 397
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 397
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 398
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 400
▫ Radial Ply Tires ..................... 400
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped .............. 400
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 401
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped ............ 402
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 402
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 403
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 404
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 404
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 405
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 406
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 408
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 409
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 410
▫ Base System ........................ 412
▫ Premium System – If Equipped .......... 415
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
▫ General Information .................. 419
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 420
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped .............. 420
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped .............. 420
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 421
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 421
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 421
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 422
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 423
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 423
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 424
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 424
▫ E-85 General Information ............... 424
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 425
▫ Fuel Requirements ................... 425
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 426
▫ Starting ........................... 427
▫ Cruising Range ...................... 427
▫ Replacement Parts ................... 427
▫ Maintenance ........................ 427
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 428
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ....... 430
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 431
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 431
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...... 432
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 432
▫ Overloading ........................ 432
▫ Loading ........................... 433
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 433
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 433
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 436
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 437
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 438
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 439
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 444
䡵
Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.)
. . 445
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive .... 445
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in
the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
follow these steps.
•
Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “ACC”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “RUN”),
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your foot is firmly
pressing on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the shift
lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK
position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must
be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission – 3.6L
Engine
This vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shift
lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional
shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves
forward and rearward, always returning to the center
position after each gear is selected.
The transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both on the
shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
Standard Shifter
The standard shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW
position manually downshifts the transmission to a
lower gear based on vehicle speed.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Shifting From PARK To DRIVE
•
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on
the shift lever, then pull and hold the shift lever fully
rearward until “D” is displayed in the EVIC.
•
To shift back into PARK from DRIVE, bring the vehicle
to a complete stop, fully press the brake pedal, press
the lock button on the shift lever, then push and hold
the shift lever fully forward until “P” is displayed in
the EVIC.
Shifting From REVERSE To NEUTRAL
•
Pull the shift lever rearward to the first detent and
release. “N” will display in the EVIC.
•
To shift back into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, firmly
press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift
lever, then push the shift lever forward to the first
detent and release. “R” will display in the EVIC.
Shifting From NEUTRAL To DRIVE
•
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on
the shift lever, then pull the shift lever rearward and
release. “D” will display in the EVIC.
•
To shift back into NEUTRAL from DRIVE, firmly press
the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift
lever, then push the shift lever forward and release.
“N” will display in the EVIC.
Shifting From REVERSE To DRIVE
•
Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the
brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift lever,
then pull the shift lever rearward and release when
“D” is displayed in the EVIC.
•
To shift back into REVERSE from DRIVE, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the brake
pedal, press the lock button on the shift lever, then
push the shift lever forward and release when “R” is
displayed in the EVIC.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting From DRIVE To SPORT/LOW
Vehicles Equipped With SPORT Mode
•
To shift from DRIVE to SPORT, pull the shift lever
rearward until “S” is displayed in the EVIC.
•
To shift back into DRIVE from SPORT, pull the shift
lever rearward until “D” is displayed in the EVIC.
Vehicles Equipped With LOW Mode
•
To shift from DRIVE to LOW, pull the shift lever
rearward until “L” is displayed in the EVIC.
•
To shift back into DRIVE from LOW, pull the shift
lever rearward until “D” is displayed in the EVIC.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Optional Shifter With AutoStick姞
The optional shift lever (with AutoStick威 shift paddles
mounted on the steering wheel) provides PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
Once in the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rear-
ward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE
mode. You do not need to press the shift lever button
when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift
control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section). Pressing
the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT
position will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – 5.7L
Engine
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the “AutoStick威” shift control (refer to
“AutoStick威” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display
that gear in the instrument cluster as 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released), after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the
OFF position, the shift lever is locked in the
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the trans-
mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the “AutoStick威” mode
(refer to “AutoStick威” in this section) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will con-
tinue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow-
ing conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
•
the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature
that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more
control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Operation – 3.6L Engine
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply tap one of
the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. When AutoStick威 is active, the
current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster. In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, except as described below. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen.
•
If AutoStick威 is engaged while in DRIVE mode, lack of
accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission
to revert to automatic operation. The transmission will
also upshift automatically once redline is reached. If
the pedal is pressed to the floor, the transmission will
downshift when possible (based on current vehicle
speed and gear).
•
If AutoStick威 is engaged while in SPORT mode,
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the
pedal is pressed to the floor.
•
In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the cur-
rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
accelerates.
To disengage AutoStick威 mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again displayed in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Operation – 5.7L Engine
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply
move the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the
DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheel-
mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. When
AutoStick威 is active, the current transmission gear is
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick威 mode,
the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is
manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or
the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen, except as described below.
•
If AutoStick威 is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached.
•
If AutoStick威 is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even when
maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission
will upshift only when commanded by the driver.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows down (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
•
Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will generate an
automatic downshift (for improved acceleration)
when reasonable.
•
You can start out in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at
a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out
in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
•
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is en-
gaged.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
To disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick威 mode at
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera-
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick威 mode
(+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended
period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is displayed
momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in the gage area of the vehicle display when the
transmission is first shifted into gear, and if the drive
mode changes during vehicle operation.
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning mes-
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-
hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri-
cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”
message and a flashing icon are displayed on
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” mes-
sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over temperature con-
dition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
NOTE:
•
Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) (IF
EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control
of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations, and
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
All four of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma-
neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ-
ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-
minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momen-
tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped.
•
Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
down the hill and could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember to use
the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Synchronizing ESC
If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres-
sure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in tire over-heating and failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer. Install tire chains only on P215/65R17
using standard chains, on P225/60R18 and P235/55R18
using model 0143 (tirechaindealer.com) and on P235/
55R19 using model Z-575 (scc-chain.com).
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
1
⁄
2
mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Use on rear wheels only.
•
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-
turer if different from the speed recommended by
the manufacture.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug-
gest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors, and
•
TPM Telltale Light
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be
displayed and a chime will sound when tire pres-
sure is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will
turn ON.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW
TIRE⬙ message as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn off
and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors,
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
•
TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will
only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when
it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with
a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message and a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
flashing or changing color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update, the graphic
display in the EVIC will stop flashing or change color
back to the original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-
-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor
is not being received.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2.
If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the
TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the EVIC will
display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the
low tire pressure value flashing or in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
and the pressure value displayed will be updated and
stop flashing or return to its original color as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a different
color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States ................... MRXC4W4MA4
Canada ..................... 2546A-C4W4MA4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of 89 octane for
optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold driveability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when filling
the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and
never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
E-85 Badge
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
•
you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Funnel
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank
is being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
Access Cover
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the release cable.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label.” This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Release Cable
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE:
•
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
•
Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
tire pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Indus-
try Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Re-
fer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING! (Continued)
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Load-
ing Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
tire inflation procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for informa-
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper
inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
The wiring harness is not installed when leaving the
factory; it must be done by the dealer or customer. Refer
to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
a lower gear range using the AutoStick威 shift control (if
equipped).
NOTE: Selecting a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick威 – If Equipped
−
By using the AutoStick威 mode and selecting a specific
gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. Select the
highest gear range that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an-
other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 448
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 448
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 449
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ........ 450
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 452
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire ............ 453
▫ Road Tire Installation ................. 458
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 458
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 459
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 460
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 462
䡵 Shift Lever Override —
5 Speed Transmission ................... 464
䡵 Manual Park Release —
8 Speed Transmission (3.6L Engine) ......... 465
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 467
▫ Without The Ignition Key Fob ........... 469
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center
of the instrument panel between the center air outlets.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel
450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451
WARNING!
•
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided.
•
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1.
Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jacking Locations
454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
Mounting Spare Tire
456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 110 ft/lb. (150 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
•
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided.
•
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 110 ft/lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461
8. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to
the right of the shift lever. The override access port is near
the bottom of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the
override tab through the access port on the center con-
sole.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the rubber tray in the storage bin.
Shift Lever Override
464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION (3.6L Engine)
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
1. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console base.
Console Storage Bin
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465
3. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the spring steel lever locking tab by
pushing it to the right.
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Locking Tab Tether Strap
466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps
into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
IF Transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
(5-speed trans)
• 30 mi (48 km) max distance
(8-speed trans)
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK Trans in NEUTRAL
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Manual Park
Release” or “Shift Lever Override” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of the PARK position for towing.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to the front or rear suspension compo-
nents. Damage to your vehicle may result from
improper towing.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
•
The manufacturer does not recommend that you
tow this vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage
may occur.
Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is operable, vehicles WITHOUT AWD
may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
•
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
8-speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles
(48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground (on a flatbed, or with the rear
wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in
NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe transmission damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the
ground with no limitation on speed or distance.
Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key fob is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L ............. 473
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L ............. 474
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 475
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 475
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 477
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 477
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 478
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 479
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 482
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 482
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 483
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 485
▫ A/C Air Filter ...................... 486
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 488
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 488
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 489
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 489
7
▫ Cooling System ..................... 492
▫ Brake System ....................... 497
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 499
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped ..... 501
▫ Rear Axle .......................... 502
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 502
䡵 Fuses .............................. 508
▫ Integrated Power Module .............. 508
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center .......... 511
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 516
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 516
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 517
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, Inner Park
Lamp, And Outer Park Lamp ............ 517
▫
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
. . 519
▫ License Lamp ....................... 520
䡵 Fluid Capacities ...................... 521
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 522
▫ Engine ............................ 522
▫ Chassis ........................... 523
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 5 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level – 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
fer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi-
neered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the
air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
Battery Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Access Door
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Filter Access Cover
A/C Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior
to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant,
and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool-
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for
proper corrosion protection of your engine, which
contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
(Continued)
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
hole.
Fluid Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
•
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent
for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
CAUTION!
•
When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Integrated Power Module
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 — — Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp
Green
— Radiator Fan #1
3 50 Amp
Red
— Power Steering #1
4 30 Amp
Pink
— Starter
5 40 Amp
Green
— Anti-Lock Brakes
6 — — Fuse – Spare
7 — — Fuse – Spare
8 — — Fuse – Spare
9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
All-Wheel Drive Module –
If Equipped
10 — 10 Amp
Red
Security
11 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Horns
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
12 — 10 Amp
Red
Air Conditioning Clutch
13 — — Fuse – Spare
14 — 25 Amp
Natural
Anti-Lock Brakes
15 — 25 Amp
Natural
Transmission
16 — — Fuse – Spare
18 50 Amp
Red
— Radiator Fan #2
19 50 Amp
Red
— Power Steering #2
20 30 Amp
Pink
— Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp
Pink
— Headlamp Washers
22 — — Fuse – Spare
23 — — Fuse – Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
24 — — Fuse – Spare
28 — 25 Amp
Natural
Fuel Pump
29 — 15 Amp
Blue
Transmission/Shifter
30 — — Fuse – Spare
31 — 25 Amp
Natural
Engine Module
32 — — Fuse – Spare
33 — — Fuse – Spare
34 — 25 Amp
Natural
Powertrain #1
35 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Powertrain #2
36 — 10 Amp
Red
Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 — 10 Amp
Red
Engine Controller/Rad
Fan Relays
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
38 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module
39 — 10 Amp
Red
Power Steering
Module/AC Clutch Relay
48 — 10 Amp
Red
AWD Module/Front Axle
Disconnect
49 — — Fuse – Spare
50 — — Fuse – Spare
51 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Vacuum Pump
52 — — Fuse – Spare
53 — — Fuse – Spare
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Opening The Access Panel
Rear Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
CAUTION!
•
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
2 60 Amp
Yellow
— Front PDC Feed #1
3 — — Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp
Yellow
— Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp
Pink
— Sunroof
6 40 Amp
Green
— Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp
Green
— Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp
Pink
— Interior Lighting/
Washer Pump
9 30 Amp
Pink
— Power Locks
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
10 30 Amp
Pink
— Driver Door
11 30 Amp
Pink
— Passenger Door
12 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cigar Lighters, Instru-
ment Panel & Power
Outlet Console Rear
15 40 Amp
Green
— HVAC Blower
16 — — Fuse — Spare
17 — — Fuse — Spare
18 — — Fuse — Spare
19 — — Fuse — Spare
20 — — Fuse — Spare
21 — — Fuse — Spare
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
22 — — Fuse — Spare
23 — 10 Amp
Red
Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
24 — 15 Amp
Blue
Radio Screen
25 — 10 Amp
Red
Tire Pressure Monitor
26 — — Fuse — Spare
27 — 25 Amp
Natural
Amplifier
31 — 25 Amp
Natural
Power Seats
32 — 15 Amp
Blue
HVAC Module/Cluster
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
33 — 15 Amp
Blue
Ignition Switch/Wireless
Module
34 — 10 Amp
Red
Steering Column
Module/Clock
35 — 10 Amp
Red
Battery Sensor
36 — — Fuse — Spare
37 — 15 Amp
Blue
Radio
38 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet Inside
Arm Rest
40 — — Fuse — Spare
41 — — Fuse — Spare
42 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Defrost
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
43 — 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Heated Seats/
Steering Wheel
44 — 10 Amp
Red
Park Assist/Blind Spot/
Camera
45 — 15 Amp
Blue
Cluster/Rearview
Mirror/Compass
46 — 10 Amp
Red
Adaptive Cruise Control
47 — 10 Amp
Red
Adaptive Front Lighting
48 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Active Suspension
49 — — Fuse — Spare
50 — — Fuse — Spare
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
51 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seats
52 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Cupholders/
Rear Heated Seat
Switches
53 — 10 Amp
Red
HVAC Module/In Car
Temperature Sensor
54 — — Fuse — Spare
55 — — Fuse — Spare
56 — — Fuse — Spare
57 — — Fuse — Spare
58 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module
59 — — Fuse — Spare
60 — — Fuse — Spare
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
61 — — Fuse — Spare
62 — — Fuse — Spare
63 — — Fuse — Spare
64 — 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Windows
65 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module
66 — — Fuse — Spare
67 — 15 Amp
Blue
Run Sense
68 — 15 Amp
Blue
Illumination/Rear Sun-
shade
69 — — Fuse — Spare
70 — — Fuse — Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps ............. W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp ............. 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............ 578
Visor Vanity Lamps ..................... A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped............... 194
Door Courtesy .......................... 562
Shift Indicator Lamp ................. JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder ........LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Halogen Headlamp) ................. HIR2LL
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) ....D3S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp .............. PSY24WSV
Front Park Lamp ........................LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp ................... LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped............... H11
Front Sidemarker Lamp ................... LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp ............ LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Sidemarker Lamp .................... LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Fog Lamp – If Equipped ............... LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp .........................W21W
Exterior Bulb Number
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL).......LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License .............................. W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp, Inner Park Lamp, And Outer
Park Lamp
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Standard Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, Inner Park Lamp, And
Outer Park Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim by removing the grocery hook
(using a T-20 torque driver or similar tool), remove the
fastener, and pull back the weather strip.
3. Pull back the trunk liner to gain access to the tail lamp
wing nuts.
4. Remove the three wing nuts from the back of the tail
lamp assembly.
5. Pull the tail lamp assembly away from the vehicle
enough to access the electrical connector.
6. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector.
8. Continue removing lamp from vehicle in order to
access the bulb(s).
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk trim.
13. Close the trunk.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.4 Quarts 10.8 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
15.1 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 3.6L En-
gine
Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Automatic Transmission – 5.7L En-
gine
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS-11655, such as Fuchs
EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
Front Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Transfer Case MOPAR威 Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40 or equivalent.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Depending on operating conditions, the message may
appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
526 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 527
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
528 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 529
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid – All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
530 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 531
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
532 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing
(five-speed transmission only).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 533
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid – All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 537
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter (five-speed transmission only).
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid – All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 543
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 543
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 543
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 543
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 543
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 544
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 544
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 544
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 545
▫ Service Contract ..................... 545
䡵 Warranty Information .................. 546
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 546
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 547
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .................... 547
▫ In Canada ......................... 547
䡵 Publication Order Forms ................ 547
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 543
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247–9753
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
544 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 545
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
546 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 547
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need
in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, main-
taining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manu-
als make it easy for students and technicians to find and
fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
548 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 549
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
550 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .......................375
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ..............377
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 199
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........494
Adding Fuel ...........................428
Adding Washer Fluid ..................... 489
Additives, Fuel ......................... 423
Adjustable Pedals .......................194
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 482
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 485
Air Conditioning Filter .................342,486
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 485,486
Air Conditioning System ................340,485
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 398
Airbag ..............................56,66
Airbag Deployment ....................... 67
Airbag Light ...................63,64,69,84,280
Airbag Maintenance .......................68
Airbag, Side ...................... 60,62,65,66
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 60,62,66
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................18
Alarm Light ...........................281
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Alarm, Panic ............................ 24
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................ 369,501
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............ 377,379
Anti-Lock Warning Light .................. 280
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............493,521
Disposal ........................... 495
Appearance Care ........................502
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ......... 18
Assist, Hill Start ........................383
Auto Down Power Windows ................39
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................32
Auto Up Power Windows ..................39
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 94
552 INDEX
Automatic Door Locks ..................... 32
Automatic Headlights ....................176
Automatic Oil Change Indicator .............293
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 340
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives .....................500
Automatic Transmission ...........355,358,499,501
Adding Fluid .................... 501,523
Autostick ..........................365
Fluid and Filter Changes ............... 501
Fluid Change .......................501
Fluid Level Check ....................500
Fluid Type ......................... 523
Special Additives .....................500
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .....357
Autostick .............................365
Axle Fluid .............................523
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............523
B-Pillar Location ........................ 393
Battery ...............................483
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 25
Location ........................... 483
Belts, Seat ............................ 47,84
Body Mechanism Lubrication ............... 488
Brake Assist System ......................380
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 379
Brake Fluid ............................523
Brake System ........................... 497
Anti-Lock (ABS) .....................377
Fluid Check .....................498,523
Master Cylinder .....................498
Parking ........................... 375
Warning Light .......................281
Brake, Parking .......................... 375
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............354
Brakes ............................... 497
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........ 81
10
INDEX 553
Brightness, Interior Lights ..................184
Bulb Replacement .....................516,517
Bulbs, Light ..........................86,516
Camera, Rear ...........................235
Capacities, Fluid ........................521
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ........................ 481
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............. 495
Car Washes ............................ 503
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 83,424
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................431
Cellular Phone ..........................332
Certification Label .......................431
Chains, Tire ............................ 406
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 449
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................389
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............279,475
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............82
Checks, Safety ...........................82
Child Restraint .................. 71,72,73,76,79
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............75,76
Child Safety Locks ........................ 32
Clean Air Gasoline ....................... 421
Cleaning
Wheels ............................ 504
Windshield Wiper Blades ...............488
Climate Control .........................332
Clock ................................ 328
Coin Holder ...........................262
Cold Weather Operation ...................351
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............331
Compact Spare Tire ...................... 401
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 297
Connector
UCI ..............................328
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......328
554 INDEX
Conserving Fuel ........................ 294
Console, Floor ..........................262
Console, Overhead ....................... 237
Contract, Service ........................ 545
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........495
Cooling System .........................492
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............494
Coolant Capacity ..................... 521
Coolant Level ....................492,496
Disposal of Used Coolant ...............495
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................ 493
Inspection .......................... 496
Points to Remember ..................496
Pressure Cap ........................495
Radiator Cap .......................495
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ....493,521,522
Corrosion Protection ..................... 502
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............199
Cupholders .........................259,507
Customer Assistance ..................... 543
Data Recorder, Event ......................70
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ........... 186
Daytime Running Lights ...................179
Dealer Service ..........................477
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ................ 43
Deck Lid, Power Release ...................41
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 267
Defroster, Windshield ...................84,338
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................187
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 475
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 181
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ........................ 479
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................467
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............495
Engine Oil ......................... 482
10
INDEX 555
Door Locks .............................29
Door Locks, Automatic ....................32
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 238
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces .................. 370
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ............................. 371
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy .... 294
E-85 Fuel .............................424
Electric Rear Window Defrost ............... 267
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 97
Electrical Power Outlets ...................254
Electronic Brake Control System .............379
Anti-Lock Brake System ................379
Brake Assist System ...................380
Traction Control System ................380
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ....508
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....196,199
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 381
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) .............................235,285
Emergency Deck Lid Release ................ 43
Emergency Trunk Release ...................43
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .............462
Hazard Warning Flasher ............... 448
Jacking ............................449
Jump Starting ....................... 458
Overheating ........................ 448
Towing ............................467
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 475
Engine ............................... 474
Air Cleaner ......................... 482
Block Heater ........................ 352
Break-In Recommendations ..............81
Checking Oil Level ................... 479
Compartment ....................473,474
556 INDEX
Compartment Identification .............473
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................492,522
Cooling ........................... 492
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 83,424
Fails to Start ........................ 351
Flooded, Starting ..................... 351
Fuel Requirements ....................420
Jump Starting ....................... 458
Multi-Displacement ...................374
Oil .........................479,521,522
Oil Change Interval ................ 293,480
Oil Filler Cap .......................481
Oil Filter ...........................482
Oil Filter Disposal ....................482
Oil Selection .....................480,521
Oil Synthetic ........................481
Overheating ........................ 448
Starting ...........................348
Temperature Gauge ...................284
Engine Oil Viscosity ...................... 481
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 66
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 21
Ethanol ............................... 421
Event Data Recorder ...................... 70
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................83,424
Exhaust System ....................... 83,489
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................95
Exterior Lighting ........................175
Exterior Lights ..........................86
Filler Location Fuel ...................... 280
Filters
Air Cleaner ......................... 482
Air Conditioning ..................342,486
Engine Oil ....................... 482,522
Engine Oil Disposal ................... 482
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 181
10
INDEX 557
Flashers
Hazard Warning .....................448
Turn Signal .................... 86,181,276
Flat Tire Changing .......................449
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ......................427
Engine Oil ......................... 426
Fuel Requirements .................424,425
Maintenance ........................427
Replacement Parts ....................427
Starting ...........................427
Flooded Engine Starting ...................351
Floor Console ..........................262
Fluid Capacities ......................... 521
Fluid Leaks .............................86
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................500
Brake ............................. 498
Cooling System ......................492
Engine Oil ......................... 479
Transfer Case ....................... 501
Fluid, Brake ...........................523
Fluids ................................ 522
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........522
Fog Lights .......................... 179,276
Folding Rear Seat ........................168
Forward Collision Warning ..............222,289
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................462
Fuel .................................420
Additives ..........................423
Clean Air ..........................421
Conserving .........................294
Ethanol ........................... 421
Filler Door (Gas Cap) .................. 280
Gasoline ........................... 420
Gauge ............................280
Light .............................289
Materials Added .....................423
558 INDEX
Methanol .......................... 421
Octane Rating ....................... 522
Saver Mode ........................ 294
Specifications ....................... 522
Tank Capacity ....................... 521
Fuel Optimizer .........................294
Fuel Saver ............................. 294
Fuel, Flexible ...........................424
Fuses ................................508
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ...........238
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................420
Conserving .........................294
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................421
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................421
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ..................284
Fuel ..............................280
Speedometer ........................ 280
Tachometer .........................276
Gear Ranges ........................ 355,359
Gear Select Lever Override .................464
General Information ............ 18,26,141,220,419
General Maintenance ..................... 478
Glass Cleaning .......................... 506
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 432,434
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............. 432,433
GVWR ...............................432
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ...................... 371
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................448
Head Restraints .........................165
Head Rests ............................ 165
Headlight Washers ....................... 489
Headlights ............................517
Automatic .........................176
10
INDEX 559
Bulb Replacement ....................517
Cleaning ...........................506
Delay .............................176
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 181
Lights On Reminder .................. 179
On With Wipers ...................176,188
Passing ............................181
Switch ............................175
Time Delay ......................... 176
Washers ...........................489
Heated Mirrors ..........................98
Heated Seats ........................... 160
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 352
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 181
Hill Start Assist .........................383
Hitches
Trailer Towing .......................436
Holder, Coin ........................... 262
Holder, Cup ........................... 259
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 238
Ignition
Key ............................... 12
Illuminated Entry ........................ 21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................16
Infant Restraint ........................71,72
Information Center, Vehicle .................285
Instrument Cluster ....................274,276
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............273
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............507
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............508
Interior Appearance Care ..................505
Interior Fuses .......................... 508
Interior Lights .......................... 184
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........187
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ...........................450
560 INDEX
Jack Operation ..........................453
Jacking Instructions ......................453
Jump Starting .......................... 458
Key-In Reminder .........................15
Key, Programming ........................18
Key, Replacement ........................ 17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 16
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ...................34,349
Keyless Entry System ...................... 21
Keyless Go .............................12
Keys .................................12
Kicker Sound System .....................328
Knee Bolster ..........................56,57
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............181
Lane Change Assist ...................... 181
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................47
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) .....75,76
Latch Plate .............................48
Latches ................................ 86
Lead Free Gasoline ......................420
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 86
Life of Tires ............................404
Light Bulbs ..........................86,516
Lights .............................. 86,175
Airbag .................... 63,64,69,84,280
Alarm ............................ 281
Anti-Lock ..........................280
Automatic Headlights ................. 176
Brake Assist Warning ..................386
Brake Warning ......................281
Bulb Replacement .................516,517
Daytime Running .................... 179
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........180,181
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 386
10
INDEX 561
Exterior ............................ 86
Fog............................179,276
Hazard Warning Flasher ............... 448
Headlight Switch ..................... 175
Headlights ...................... 175,517
Headlights On Reminder ...............179
Headlights On With Wipers ..........176,188
High Beam .........................181
High Beam Indicator .................. 276
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............181
Illuminated Entry .....................21
Instrument Cluster ...................175
Intensity Control ..................... 184
Interior ............................ 184
License ............................ 520
Lights On Reminder .................. 179
Low Fuel ..........................289
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ...... 279
Map Reading ..................... 182,183
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ........ 186
Passing ............................181
Reading ...................... 182,183,237
Seat Belt Reminder ................... 284
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............281
Service .........................516,517
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) ................279
SmartBeams ........................177
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............281
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .......277,410
Traction Control ..................... 386
Turn Signal .................... 86,180,181
Vanity Mirror ........................ 98
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 276
Load Leveling System .................... 270
Loading Vehicle ......................431,433
Capacities .......................... 433
Tires .............................. 393
562 INDEX
Locks .................................29
Auto Unlock ......................... 32
Automatic Door ......................32
Child Protection ......................32
Door .............................. 29
Power Door ......................... 31
Low Tire Pressure System ..................410
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................ 75,76
Lubrication, Body ....................... 488
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 483
Maintenance Procedures ...................478
Maintenance Schedule .................... 526
Maintenance, General .....................478
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 279,475
Manual Transmission .....................502
Fluid Level Check ....................502
Manual, Service ......................... 547
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .................. 498
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) .............169
Memory Seat ...........................169
Memory Seats and Radio .................. 169
Methanol .............................421
Mini-Trip Computer ......................297
Mirrors ................................94
Automatic Dimming ...................94
Electric Powered ...................... 97
Electric Remote ....................... 97
Exterior Folding ......................95
Heated .............................98
Outside ............................ 95
Vanity ............................. 98
Mode
Fuel Saver .........................294
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............410
Mopar Parts .........................477,546
10
INDEX 563
MTBE/ETBE ...........................421
Multi-Displacement Engine System ...........374
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 180
Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) ..........235
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 81
Occupant Restraints ................... 43,62,67
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .............60,62,66
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .............. 522
Odometer .............................276
Oil Change Indicator ..................277,293
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .............. 277,293
Oil Filter, Change ........................482
Oil Filter, Selection .......................482
Oil, Engine .........................479,522
Capacity ........................... 521
Change Interval ...................293,480
Checking ..........................479
Dipstick ...........................479
Disposal ........................... 482
Filter ..........................482,522
Filter Disposal .......................482
Identification Logo ................... 480
Materials Added to ...................481
Recommendation .................. 480,521
Synthetic .......................... 481
Viscosity ........................481,521
Onboard Diagnostic System ................ 475
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ........... 238
Operating Precautions ....................475
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................95
Overdrive .............................365
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................365
Overhead Console .......................237
Overheating, Engine ................... 284,448
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,547
564 INDEX
Paint Care ............................. 502
Panic Alarm ............................24
Park Sense System, Rear ................... 225
Parking Brake ..........................375
Passing Light ........................... 181
Pedals, Adjustable ....................... 194
Pets ..................................81
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........393
Power
Deck Lid Release ..................... 41
Distribution Center (Fuses) ........... 508,511
Door Locks .........................31
Mirrors ............................97
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........254
Seats ............................. 157
Steering ...........................373
Sunroof ......................... 247,251
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .........191
Windows ........................... 38
Power Steering Fluid .....................523
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............56
Preparation for Jacking ....................452
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ........................... 54
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................21
Radial Ply Tires ......................... 400
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........495
Radio Operation ........................ 332
Radio Remote Controls .................... 330
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ................ 189
Rear Camera ........................... 235
Rear Cupholder ......................... 261
Rear Park Sense System ................... 225
Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 168
Rear Window Defroster ...................267
Rear Window Features ....................267
10
INDEX 565
Recorder, Event Data ......................70
Recreational Towing ......................445
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 421
Refrigerant ............................ 486
Reminder, Lights On .....................179
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................55
Remote Control
Starting System .......................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 330
Remote Starting System ....................26
Remote Trunk Release ..................... 41
Replacement Bulbs ....................... 516
Replacement Keys ........................ 17
Replacement Parts .......................477
Replacement Tires .......................405
Reporting Safety Defects ...................547
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ........... 277,293
Restraint, Head ......................... 165
Restraints, Child .........................71
Restraints, Occupant ...................... 43
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................462
Rotation, Tires ..........................409
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................84
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 86
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 547
Safety Information, Tire ................... 387
Safety Tips .............................82
Safety, Exhaust Gas ....................... 83
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 526
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................507
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 55
Seat Belts .......................... 43,47,84
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 51
And Pregnant Women .................. 56
Child Restraint .................71,72,73,79
Extender ...........................56
566 INDEX
Front Seat ......................... 47,48
Inspection .......................... 84
Operating Instructions ..................48
Pretensioners ........................ 54
Rear Seat ...........................47
Untwisting Procedure ..................52
Seats .................................157
Adjustment ......................... 157
Easy Entry .........................172
Head Restraints ...................... 165
Heated ............................160
Height Adjustment ................... 157
Memory ........................... 169
Power ............................ 157
Rear Folding ........................168
Seatback Release .....................168
Tilting ............................ 157
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 493,522
Selection of Oil ......................... 480
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................16
Sentry Key Programming ................... 18
Sentry Key Replacement ...................17
Service Assistance ....................... 543
Service Contract ......................... 545
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................279
Service Manuals ........................ 547
Setting the Clock ........................328
Shift Lever Override ...................... 464
Shifting ...............................353
Automatic Transmission ................353
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............51
Shoulder Belts ...........................47
Side Airbag .............................65
Side View Mirror Adjustment ................95
Signals, Turn ...................... 86,181,276
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............370
10
INDEX 567
SmartBeams ...........................177
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................406
Snow Tires ............................ 408
Sound System
Kicker ............................328
Spare Tire ....................... 401,402,450
Spark Plugs ............................ 522
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ................... 420,522
Oil ............................... 522
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........196,199
Speedometer ...........................280
Starting .............................26,348
Automatic Transmission ................348
Cold Weather .......................351
Engine Fails to Start .................. 351
Remote ............................ 26
Starting and Operating .................... 348
Starting Procedures ...................... 348
Steering
Column Controls ..................... 180
Column Lock ....................... 190
Power ............................ 373
Tilt Column ......................190,191
Wheel, Heated ...................... 192
Wheel, Tilt ......................190,191
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .............. 330
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls .............................. 330
Storage ............................ 262,516
Storage, Vehicle ...................... 342,516
Storing Your Vehicle ...................... 516
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 462
Sun Roof ........................... 247,251
Sunglasses Storage .......................238
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 56
Sway Control, Trailer .....................435
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................481
568 INDEX
System, Remote Starting ....................26
Tachometer ............................276
Telescoping Steering Column .............190,191
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 340
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......284,449
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............75
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Tilt Steering Column ................... 190,191
Time Delay, Headlight ....................176
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........393
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 391
Tire Markings .......................... 387
Tire Safety Information ....................387
Tires ............................86,397,549
Aging (Life of Tires) ..................404
Air Pressure ........................ 397
Chains ............................ 406
Changing ....................... 449,453
Compact Spare ...................... 401
Flat Changing ....................... 449
General Information ..................397
High Speed ......................... 400
Inflation Pressures ....................398
Jacking .........................452,453
Life of Tires ........................404
Load Capacity ....................393,394
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .........410
Pressure Warning Light ................ 277
Quality Grading .....................549
Radial ............................400
Replacement ........................405
Rotation ...........................409
Safety ..........................387,397
Sizes ............................. 389
Snow Tires .........................408
Spare Tire ..........................450
10
INDEX 569
Spinning ...........................403
Trailer Towing .......................441
Tread Wear Indicators .................404
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............438
Towing ............................... 433
Behind a Motorhome ..................445
Disabled Vehicle .....................467
Guide .............................437
Recreational ........................ 445
Weight ............................437
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome .......... 445
Traction Control ......................... 380
Trailer Towing .......................... 433
Cooling System Tips .................. 445
Hitches ............................436
Minimum Requirements ................439
Tips ..............................444
Trailer and Tongue Weight .............. 438
Wiring ............................ 442
Trailer Towing Guide .....................437
Trailer Weight ..........................437
Transfer Case ........................... 501
Fluid ..........................501,523
Maintenance ........................501
Transmission ...........................499
Automatic ....................355,358,499
Fluid ............................. 523
Shifting ........................... 353
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 238
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........ 21
Transporting Pets ........................ 81
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 404
Trip Odometer ..........................276
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ....................41,43
570 INDEX
Trunk Release Remote Control ...............41
Trunk Release, Emergency .................. 43
Turn Signals .........................181,276
UCI Connector .........................328
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 549
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 328
Universal Transmitter .....................238
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............. 52
Vanity Mirrors ........................... 98
Vehicle Certification Label .................431
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................394,431,433
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage .......................342,516
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................... 481
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................. 448
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) ............. 276
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information ..................... 546
Washer
Adding Fluid .......................489
Washers, Windshield .................. 188,489
Washing Vehicle ......................... 503
Water
Driving Through ..................... 371
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................504
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................ 504
Wind Buffeting .....................41,250,253
Window Fogging ........................342
Windows ..............................38
Power ............................. 38
Windshield Defroster ...................... 84
10
INDEX 571
Windshield Washers ................... 186,188
Fluid ............................. 489
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................488
Windshield Wipers .......................186
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................488
Wipers, Intermittent ......................187
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .................... 189
572 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12C27-126-AC 3rd Edition Printed in U.S.A.
12C481-126-AE
5th Edition
